2008 Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Index
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A
box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things
that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the
warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Front Seats
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats. To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
Power Seats
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is
located behind the power seat control on the outboard
side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to
be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Power Lumbar
On vehicles with this feature, turn the knob forward or
rearward to increase or decrease lumbar support.
If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
• To raise the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the bottom of the control.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of lumbar support.
Heated Seats
On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are
located on the driver’s and passenger’s doors.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
information.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
heated seat and seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through
the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and
to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will
show the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated seat feature
after restarting your vehicle, press the heated seat
or seatback button again.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save your positions in memory, do the following:
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable
position.
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this
feature are located on the
driver’s door panel, and
are used to program
and recall memory settings
for the driver’s seat,
outside mirrors, and the
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-33
for more information.
Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and
recall their positions.
Not all adjustable throttles and brake pedals will
have the ability to save and recall their positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are heard
indicating that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brake pedal
position can be programmed by repeating the above
steps and pressing button 2.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake
pedals will move to the position previously stored.
You will hear a single beep.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit
position can be recalled by pressing the exit button.
You will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat
will move back.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature
is on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror, and adjustable
pedal movements will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT
RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory function at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal
switch.
The memory seat and easy exit features can also be
programmed using the DIC.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, the
driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may
stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction
and press the appropriate control for the area that is not
responding for two seconds. Try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling, see
your dealer for service.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seat(s).
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Head Restraints
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the release
button, located on the
top of the seatback,
while you push the head
restraint down.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seat is a 60/40 split bench seat that can be
folded to give you more cargo space and access to the
more information on operation of the folding midgate.
To fold either side of the seat do the following:
1. Push the rear seat head restraints all the
way down.
2. Pull the seat loop
located where the
seatback and seat
Center Seat
cushion meet. The seat
cushion will release and
allow you to tilt it toward
the front of the vehicle.
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The seatback
doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for
the driver and passenger when the center seat is
not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the
seatback is folded down.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
3. Fold the seatback forward until it is flat. You may
have to move the front seats forward slightly
to do this.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
be sure to press the rear of the seat cushion
down. This action locks the seatback in place.
4. Repeat the procedure for the other side.
To return the seats to the normal position, push the
seatback up and fold the seat cushion down.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Raise the head restraint.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
People riding on the tailgate (if equipped) can
easily lose their balance and fall even when
the vehicle is operated at low speeds. Falling
from a moving vehicle may result in serious
injuries or death.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
restrained properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt except for the center front passenger position (if
page 1-32 for more information.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
To move it down, squeeze
the buttons (A) on the
sides of the height adjuster
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each rear passenger position in
the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide
to the shoulder belt:
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-33.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the
buckle.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can
strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. In
addition, young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone; they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
appropriate child restraints.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
for additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
{CAUTION:
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It is
always better to secure a child restraint in a
rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
The right side rear passenger and center seating
positions have exposed metal anchors located in the
crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located near the top
tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Rear Seat
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
The top tether anchors are located on the back of the
rear seat frame above the floor for each rear seating
position. Fold down the rear seatback(s) to access the
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
{CAUTION:
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach the top tether to
the top tether anchor, if there is one. Refer to
the child restraint instructions and the following
steps:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
1.1. To access the top tether anchors, raise the
seat cushion by pulling up on the strap loop
at the rear of the seat cushion and fold
the seat cushion forward. Then fold
the seatback forward until it is flat. See Rear
information.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
1.2. Place the child restraint in the vehicle, near
the seating position that you are using.
1.3. Route the top tether according to your child
restraint instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
2. Attach the lower attachments to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have lower
attachments or the desired seating position does
not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint
with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer
to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and
the instructions in this manual.
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
2.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
2.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1.4. Attach the top tether attachment to the top
tether anchor.
3. Tighten the top tether.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1.5. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward.
Then lower the seat cushion until the
seatback and the seat cushion lock into
position.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-42.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
1. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It is
always better to secure a child restraint in a
rear seat.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
this, including important safety information.
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
for additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
page 3-34.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the person seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
If your vehicle has rollover capable roof-rail
airbags, they are designed to inflate in
{CAUTION:
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle, during a vehicle
rollover, or in a severe frontal impact. They are
not designed to inflate in rear crashes.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle design.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the
driver’s seat. The seat position sensor provides
information that is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead
console when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will
page 3-34.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-10.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask
the person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-70 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-15.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
operation of the passenger sensing system.
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed
for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top of the seat
fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor
module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-72
for additional important information.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Airbags
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more information.
Restraint System Check
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-64
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition, all door locks,
tailgate, and side storage boxes.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can also
start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter, with the remote start button, provides
an increased operating range of 195 feet (60 m) away.
However, the operating range may be less while the
vehicle is running. As a result, you may need to
be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to
start it.
/(Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
Q (Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors, including
the tailgate.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps will flash once to indicate
locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
horn will chirp when Q is pressed again within
three seconds of the previous press of the lock button.
on page 3-63 for additional information.
Pressing Q will arm the content theft-deterrent system.
" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door. If " is
pressed again within three seconds, all remaining
doors, including the tailgate, will unlock.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If it is dark enough outside, your interior lamps will
come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition
is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the turn
signal lamps will flash twice to indicate unlocking has
occurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
the exterior lights will turn on briefly if it is dark
enough outside. See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under
page 3-63.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters
are re-coded. The vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle.
Pressing " on the RKE transmitter will disarm the
content theft-deterrent system. See Content
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
Battery Replacement
release L to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps
will flash and the horn will sound three times.
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
information.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash
and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved
to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the
vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or
air conditioning systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will return after the key
is turned to the ON/RUN position.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system,
the climate control system will default to a heating or
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle
was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated seats, the heated
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and
will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, you will need to manually
turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
on page 1-5 for additional information.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation. However, the
range may be less while the vehicle is running. As a
result, you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn
it off, than you were to turn it on.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
/(Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Immediately press and
hold the transmitter’s remote start button until the
turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the
vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote start
button for two to four seconds. Pressing the remote
start button again after the vehicle has started
will turn the engine off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
between driving sequences. The engine will run for
10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle
start system enabled. The system may be enabled or
disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under
page 3-63 for additional information. If your vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to
enable or disable the remote vehicle start system.
The additional ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key.
Remote Start Ready
After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle
can be remote started again.
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the
ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an
emission control system malfunction and the check
engine light comes on.
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature, the
RKE transmitter will have an extended range that allows
locking or unlocking of the vehicle from approximately
197 feet (60 m) away.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil
pressure gets low.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the doors.
Doors and Locks
To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use
the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter or the key.
Door Locks
To lock or unlock the door from the inside, slide the
manual lever up or down, or use the power door locks
switch.
{CAUTION:
Power Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a door
is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last
door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that
the delayed locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking
feature and immediately lock all the doors.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
2. Press unlock twice on the RKE transmitter.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can also program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Door Lock Delay” under
page 3-63.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Security Lock Label
shown
The rear doors must be open to access them. The
label showing lock and unlock positions is located near
the lock.
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
programming.
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Midgate®
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock,
using the power door lock switch, or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle
has one.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo
area covered and the tailgate and the Midgate®
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the cargo
covers on and the tailgate and Midgate® open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
connections must pass through the seal
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
between the body and the Midgate®:
• Make sure all windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed on the setting
that brings in outside air. This will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Dual
page 3-23.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following are the main components of the Midgate®
system:
Midgate® Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with a Midgate® and a
removable rear glass panel. The Midgate® allows you to
extend the length of your vehicle’s cargo area.
A. Latch Levers
B. Grab Handles
C. Glass-Catch
Release Button
E. Window
Retaining Tabs
F. Midgate® Release
Handle
D. Glass Lock Knobs
G. Window Alignment
Arrows
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Glass Removal and Storage
{CAUTION:
If the removable rear glass is not stored
properly, it could be thrown about the vehicle
in a crash or sudden maneuver. People in the
vehicle could be injured. Whenever you store
the rear glass in the vehicle, always be sure
that it is stored securely in the Midgate®
storage pocket.
Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster is
on. If you remove the rear glass with the rear defroster
on, you may see a discharge spark coming from
the latch area.
2. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.
Once unlatched, the glass-catch release button (C)
will catch the rear glass and prevent it from
falling forward.
To remove the rear glass do the following:
page 1-11 for more information. The front seats
may have to be moved forward slightly to allow the
rear seats to fold completely.
Although the rear glass can be removed without
folding the rear seats, you will not be able to access
the rear glass storage pocket. Be sure to fold the
seats before removing the rear glass.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. While holding the rear glass in place, press the
glass-catch release button (C) and pull the top of
the rear glass toward you using the grab
4. With the rear glass tilted toward you, lift it out from
the lower window frame channel. Use the grab
handles to assist you in removing the rear glass.
handle(s) (B) located at the top of the rear glass.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Turn both glass lock knobs (D), located at both top
corners of the storage pocket, to the locked
position. Push in on the corner of the rear glass to
allow the lock knob to engage more easily.
5. Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in the
Midgate®, guiding the lower edge of the rear glass
behind the three rear glass retaining tabs (E).
Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket,
with grab handles facing you, until the next step.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reinstalling the Rear Glass
To reinstall the rear glass, do the following:
1. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.
Once both glass lock knobs are in the locked
position, the rear glass is securely stored.
7. Push both latch levers up to the locked position.
You should hear a click when each latch lever
locks correctly.
2. Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turn
the glass lock knobs, located at both top corners of
the glass storage pocket, to the unlocked position.
The rear seats can be returned to the normal
position when the rear glass is out and stored
properly in the storage pocket.
3. Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket using
the grab handles.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to align the rear
glass side-to-side using
the alignment arrows (G).
5. Apply a firm downward pressure and then push the
rear glass flat against the window frame. Use the
grab handles at the top of the rear glass to
assist you.
4. With the rear glass tilted at an angle, place the
bottom edge in the lower channel of the window
frame.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lower the Midgate®, do the following:
1. Fold the rear seats. The front seats might have to
be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to
more information.
6. Push the rear glass flat against the window frame
and push each latch lever up until it locks. You
should hear a click when each latch lever locks
correctly.
Lowering the Midgate® with the Rear
Glass in Place
The Midgate® can be lowered to allow the cargo area of
your vehicle to extend into the cab. The rear glass
can be either installed in its normal position, or it can be
removed and stored in the rear glass storage pocket.
Rear Glass in Normal Position
2. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the Midgate®
securely so it does not fall forward. Turn the
Midgate® handle clockwise and pull the Midgate®
toward you.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lowering the Midgate® with the Rear
Glass in the Storage Pocket
3. Lower the Midgate® until it is flat.
Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raising the Midgate®
To return the Midgate® to its normal position, raise the
Midgate® up with a firm swinging motion until it
latches into place securely. This will help to ensure that
the Midgate® closes with enough force to engage
the latches.
If the rear glass is removed and you would like to put it
back, do so using the instructions given previously.
Midgate® Lowered with Crossbar Attached
This procedure works the same as the procedure
described previously, but when you lower the Midgate®
with the rear glass in the stored position, you will
notice that the entire crossbar will lower with the
Midgate®. This is completely normal; however, since the
crossbar lowers with the Midgate®, it will be heavier.
As you lower the Midgate® be ready for the extra weight
and do not let the Midgate® fall as you lower it.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tailgate Removal
Tailgate
The tailgate is not to be removed. This may cause
damage to electrical connector resulting in loss
of lock/unlock and rear vision camera function.
{CAUTION:
Power Running Boards
Your vehicle may have power running boards.
The power running boards automatically extend from
beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door
has been opened. Once the door is closed, the running
boards will automatically move back under the vehicle
after a brief delay. The vehicle must not be moving
for the running boards to extend or retract.
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the
tailgate, even when the vehicle is operated at
low speeds. People riding on the tailgate can
easily lose their balance and fall in response to
vehicle maneuvers. Falling from a moving
vehicle may result in serious injuries or death.
Do not allow people to ride on the tailgate. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
The switch used to disable
the power running boards
is located on the center
console below the climate
control system.
Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
power door lock switch to lock and unlock the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling
the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, push it firmly upward until it
latches. Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure it is
latched securely.
The running boards cannot be disabled in the extended
position.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
controls are located on
each of the side doors.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
Driver’s Side shown
The driver’s door also has switches that control the
passenger and rear windows. The power windows work
when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY
or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
page 2-31.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
When there are children in the rear seat use
the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Windows
Sun Visors
Windows with an express-down feature allow the
windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press
down fully on the window switch, then release, to
activate the express-down mode. The express-down
mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the
front edge of the switch.
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side
to cover the driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the
side window. It can also be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch is
located with the power window switches on the
driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position. Press the switch to turn the lockout
feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to
show the lockout feature is on.
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull-out
Extension
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Pull the sun visor extender out
for additional coverage. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and swing it to the side to cover the
side window.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the
driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the sun
visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the
theft-deterrent system will not start the arming
process until the last door is closed and the delay
page 2-10.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
This is the security light.
The content theft deterrent system does not sense
if the midgate or tailgate are open or ajar,
therefore, vehicle contents may not be protected if
the midgate is left open or ajar.
If a locked door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn
will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not
placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door
is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash
and the horn will sound for about two minutes, then
will turn off to save the battery power.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with
the door open or the RKE transmitter. You should also
remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct
ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the power door lock switch. The
security light will come on to inform the driver the
system is arming. If a door is open when the doors
are locked, the security light will flash.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if it is armed.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and
turn it to START to turn off the alarm. The alarm will not
stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the RKE transmitter.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will
not work.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new additional key:
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn the
ignition switch to four
different positions.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while
the engine is off.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the
ACC/ACCESSORY ignition position and the ON/RUN
position may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle
from starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the ACC/
ACCESSORY ignition position for a long period of time.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
C (ON/RUN): This is the position for driving. It is the
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the key is released.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. The key can
only be removed when the ignition is turned to
LOCK/OFF.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• OnStar® System (if equipped)
• Sunroof (if equipped)
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
transmission gently until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of
the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
On vehicles with this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since the
pedals cannot move farther away from the standard
position, but can move toward the driver for better
pedal reach.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which lets
pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat,
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the
vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while using the cruise
control.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the instrument panel below
the climate control
system.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Active Fuel Management™
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on the driving conditions.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
If your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™
indicator, see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
on using this display.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission with an
electronic shift position indicator within the instrument
panel cluster. This display will show the position anytime
the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll — even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
{CAUTION:
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear, two-wheel high, four-wheel high or
four-wheel low — not in NEUTRAL. See
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-46. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
on page 4-33.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your two-wheel drive vehicle
is being towed.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
{CAUTION:
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 4-11
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE (D)
without using your brakes. You can use THIRD (3) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You can
use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed
as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
When temperatures are very cold, the Hydra-Matic®
Automatic Transmission’s gear shifting may be delayed
providing more stable shifts until the engine warms
up. Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold
If you select SECOND (2) and the Tow/Haul has not
been selected, the transmission will drive in SECOND (2)
gear. You may use this feature for reducing the speed of
the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
If you select SECOND (2) and the Tow/Haul has also
been selected, the transmission operation will be limited
to FIRST (1) and SECOND (2) gears.
The transmission torque converter clutch operation is
restricted during cold operation. When the startup
transmission temperature is approximately 64°F (18°C)
your torque converter clutch will temporarily not
operate. Once the transmission temperature rises above
68°F (20°C), normal operation will resume.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes. You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the
vehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow/Haul Mode
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. Read the part that follows before using
four-wheel drive.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight
turns, you may experience a vibration in the steering
system.
Front Axle Locking Feature
Your vehicle has a tow/haul mode. The button is located
on the end of the column shift lever. Press the button
to enable or disable the tow/haul mode. You can use this
feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load.
page 4-47 for more information.
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to
lock or unlock is normal.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle was going too fast, the automatic transmission
was not in neutral. Slow flashing means the shift is
in progress. It will stay on when the shift is completed. If
for some reason the transfer case cannot make a
requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
Automatic Transfer Case
The transfer case knob is
located to the left of the
instrument panel cluster.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. Your
front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting
also provides the best fuel economy.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions
are variable. When driving your vehicle in AUTO, the
front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is primarily
sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle’s software
determines a need for more traction, the system
will transfer more power to the front wheels. Driving in
this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than
Two-Wheel Drive High.
Your vehicle has Four Wheel Drive with StabiliTrak®.
on page 4-6.
Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
You can choose among five driving settings:
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the four-wheel
high position when you need extra traction, such as on
snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive
your vehicle. This is the best setting to use when
plowing snow.
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting
will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take
your vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash
while shifting. Fast flashing means the conditions
were not met to make the desired shift, typically the
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEUTRAL (N): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This setting also
engages your front axle and delivers extra torque. You
may never need this setting. It sends maximum
power to all four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel
Drive Low if you are driving off-road in deep sand,
deep mud, deep snow, and while climbing or descending
steep hills. StabiliTrak® will not engage in this mode.
information.
If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on,
you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message” under
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
{CAUTION:
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO position.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting
from Four-Wheel Drive Low. The indicator light will flash
while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is
completed.
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
page 2-45.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position. This can
be done at any speed, except when shifting from
Four-Wheel Drive Low.
See shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low later in this
section for more information.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
position when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving,
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the
transfer case will shift to Four-Wheel Drive High mode.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low
When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed
should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed
operation in 4L may damage or shorten the life of
the drivetrain.
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method
for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn
the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position. You
must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to
stop flashing and remain on before shifting your
transmission in gear.
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low to Four-Wheel Drive
High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High, your vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in
ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of
Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive
High position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive
High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator
light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting your
transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging your vehicle, always
wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to
stop flashing before shifting the transmission
into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging your vehicle, always
wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to
stop flashing before shifting the transmission
into gear.
The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and
bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from NEUTRAL
while the engine is running.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and
bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from NEUTRAL
while the engine is running.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel Drive High.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to NEUTRAL
till it stops and hold it for 10 seconds. Then slowly
release the dial to the four low position. The
NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case
shift to NEUTRAL is complete.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High switch position when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator
light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph
(5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer case
is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting the transmission to
REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the
transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second.
Shifting into NEUTRAL
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving
the vehicle.
2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
information.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging your vehicle, always
wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to
stop flashing before shifting the transmission
into gear.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
3. Turn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer
case shift position (Two-Wheel Drive High,
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO).
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
different modes may cause the transfer case to
enter the shift protection mode. This will protect the
transfer case from possible damage and will only allow
the transfer case to respond to one shift per
10 seconds. The transfer case may stay in this mode for
up to three minutes.
After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the NEUTRAL light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever, with
the parking brake symbol and located above the
parking brake pedal.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light goes off.
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at
least 5 mph (8 km/h).
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
information.
{CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. With
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
four-wheel drive, if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL. If you are pulling a trailer, see
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-46.
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free
to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).
So be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, then
you will be able to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P).
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have your
vehicle serviced soon.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
Parking Over Things That Burn
The shift lock release is always functional except in
the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
{CAUTION:
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer
case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL. Always set the parking brake.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
Temperature and Compass Display
Press the on/off button, located on the far left of the
mirror face, to turn the compass/temperature display on
or off.
page 4-47.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be
calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” following.
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button until either a
flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will
return.
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner
of the mirror face that shows the compass reading
and the outside temperature.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system, if equipped, are
page 2-61 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please see your GM dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not,
press and hold the on/off button until the green light
comes on, indicating that the mirror is in automatic
dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button until the
green indicator light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, the compass could
give false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
4. Calibrate the compass as described next.
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature. When
on, an automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper
level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror with the compass reading and
the outside temperature. The display can be turned
on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP or
the COMP button.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
Temperature Display
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly,
will toggle the temperature reading on and off. To
alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit
and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for
approximately four seconds until the display blinks F
and C. Press and release the TEMP button to toggle
between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity, the display will
stop blinking and display the last selection made.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Press and release the TEMP button to toggle the
temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, please consult your
GM dealer.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press and hold the TEMP button for approximately
eight seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on
or off. The indicator light to the left of the TEMP
button will turn on or off to indicate when the feature is
on. Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain off
until it is turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, your compass could
give false readings.
When the ignition is started and the compass feature is
on, the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the compass heading.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
To adjust for compass variance:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with outside power mirrors,
the controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then
press the arrows located on the four-way control
pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again to deselect
the mirror.
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This mirror has the following features.
Convex Mirror
The passenger’s side mirror may have convex glass. A
convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
seen from the driver’s seat.
Manual Folding
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Heated Mirrors
The button to turn the heated mirrors on or off is located
on the climate control panel. Press this button to
warm the driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview
mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow, and
condensation.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
information.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with outside power
foldaway mirrors, the
controls are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then
press the arrows located on the four-way control
pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again to deselect
the mirror.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them one time using the mirror controls. This will reset
them to their normal position.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
This mirror has the following features.
Automatic Dimming
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
• Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park Tilt Mirrors
Convex Mirror
If your vehicle has the memory package, the outside
mirrors are able to perform the park tilt function.
This feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view
the curb when parallel parking. This feature will cause
the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a
preselected position when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R).
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return to its
original position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), or the ignition is turned off or to
OFF/LOCK.
This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
The passenger’s side mirror may have convex glass. A
convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
seen from the driver’s seat.
Heated Mirrors
Your vehicle may also have a turn signal indicator on
the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in the
direction of the turn or lane change.
The button to turn the heated mirrors on or off is located
on the climate control panel. Press this button to
warm the driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview
mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow, and
condensation.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
information.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind
your vehicle before backing up. While backing,
be sure to look for objects and check your
vehicle’s mirrors.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, it helps you park easier
and avoid other vehicles while in REVERSE (R).
It operates at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
It can determine how close objects are to the rear
bumper, up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle.
The distance sensors are located on the rear bumper.
On some vehicles
this display can be
seen by looking over
your right shoulder.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
If your vehicle has the display, there are
three color-coded lights to provide distance and
system information.
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If your vehicle does not have the display and it
has URPA, you will hear the beeps as described
in the following information.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as you get closer to a detected object:
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will
then briefly illuminate to let you know the system is
working.
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
English
8 ft
40 in
23 in
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h). If you are above this speed, the red light on
the rear display will flash.
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and beep for
three seconds
1 ft
0.3 m
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below Midgate®/tailgate
level. Objects must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m)
from your rear bumper. This distance may be less
during warmer or humid weather.
The system can be
disabled by pressing the
rear park aid disable button
located next to the radio.
The indicator light will
come on to indicate that
URPA is off.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur for three seconds when
you are closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.
Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate is
lowered, it may not detect an object behind your
vehicle, and you might back into the object and
damage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgate is
closed when using URPA or turn off URPA when
driving with the tailgate lowered.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
• The driver disables the system.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep your
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle
or an object was hanging out of your
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
Midgate®/tailgate during your last drive cycle, the
red light may illuminate in the rear display. Once the
attached object is removed, URPA will return to
normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to your vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
minutes
OnStar Services
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or
calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Universal Home Remote
System
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your Responsibility
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
programming. You only need the original remote control
transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of
the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be
erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to park
outside of the garage. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or security device
you are programming.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete the following steps.
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above the
selected button, should slowly blink. You may
need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what you used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, you probably have a
Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see a row
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to
the previous section for Programming Universal
Home Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program your Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
you do not have the original hand held transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples, but they should be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled as
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes you
enter into the Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings that
you wrote down in Step 2, in order from left
to right, into the Universal Home Remote, when
completing Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all
three buttons at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the buttons to put the
Universal Home Remote into programming mode.
two and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating
the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the
button from five to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when you
sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what you used for
the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Overhead Console
Storage Areas
Your vehicle may have an overhead console with
reading lights and a small storage area.
Glove Box
Press the button next to the light to turn it on and off.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Front Armrest Storage Area
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage
compartment in the front bench seat.
Your vehicle may have cupholders for the front and rear
passengers.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the
cover pop up and swing open.
The cupholders are located in the center console for the
front passengers and on the rear of the center console
for the rear passengers.
The front cupholder may be removed for cleaning by
pushing down and then back on the cupholder.
Center Console Storage
Your vehicle may have a console compartment with
cupholders between the bucket seats.
To use the front cupholders, press down on the access
door and release. The door will then open. Push the
door back down to close it.
To open it, press the button and lift the console
cover open.
To use the rear cupholders, pull down on the door
located on the back of the console.
The rear of the console has a cupholder that folds down
for the rear seat passenger to use.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
To move a crossrail, lift the release lever, on both
sides of the rail, up to loosen it. Slide the crossrail to
the desired position balancing the force side to side.
Press the release lever on both sides of the rail,
down to tighten it. Try to slide the crossrail back and
forth slightly to be sure it is tight.
Luggage Carrier
The vehicle may have a luggage carrier that can be
used to load things on top of the vehicle.
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof. It
may also have crossrails which can be moved back
and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
siderails or siderail supports.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so
tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
into the siderail.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-35.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the rear glass.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while you are
driving, check to make sure the luggage and cargo are
still securely fastened.
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
Rear Storage Area
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
Your vehicle has a rear armrest/cupholder for the rear
seat passengers.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood
to the siderail supports.
To open it, pull up and then out on the tab, located at
the top center of the armrest, and pull the armrest down.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove a cargo panel(s), do the following:
Cargo Cover Panels
more information on the tailgate.
{CAUTION:
Improperly stored cargo cover panels could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove a panel, always store it
in the proper storage location. When you put it
back, always be sure that is securely
reattached.
Notice: Exceeding the weight limit of 250 lbs
(113 kg) can damage the cargo covers, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not put anything on top of the cargo covers over
the weight limit.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a three-piece cargo
cover system. The cargo panels can be removed
and stored in the cargo area of the vehicle.
The panels are embossed on the upper center
portion with the numbers 1, 2 and 3. There are also
numbered labels on the bottom of the panels.
The numbers on the top and bottom of the panels
will be used as reference when removing, storing
and reinstalling the panels.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove cargo panel 3 by pulling the left and right
cargo panel latches, located on the bottom of each
cargo panel, forward to unlock the cargo panel
latches.
3. Pull each cargo panel up and then out from the
side rails and set it aside. Remove as many
cargo panels as needed.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Panel Storage System
The three cargo panels can be stored in the cargo area
using the storage strap system. To store the panels,
do the following:
4. If cargo panel 1 needs to be removed. There are
latches on both sides that need to be released.
After you have removed each cargo panel, store them
within the cargo storage area using the cargo panel
storage system.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Secure the storage
strap system in the
cargo storage area by
attaching the six
clips included on the
cargo strap system
to the tie down
locations on either side
of the storage area.
Always use the storage strap system to store the
cargo panels during driving.
Before storing the cargo panels, be sure that the
latches are in the locked position. The latches are in
the locked position when they are parallel to the
front and back edge of the panel.
A. Secure clip A on the secondary strap.
B. Secure clip B on the secondary strap.
Use the following instructions for the proper storage
sequence and location for each panel:
C. Place the remaining primary straps on top of the
lid and tray.
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Store cargo panel 2 by loading the cargo panel with
latches down and facing toward you.
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, load the cargo panel
with latches up and facing away from you.
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Store cargo panel 3 by loading the cargo panel with
latches up and facing away from you.
5. Place the primary straps over the three cargo
covers (A). Fasten the four strap clips (B).
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Close both cross locks at the center of the strap
system to secure tightly.
6. Tighten all straps by pulling on the free end of each
strap.
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels
To reinstall a cargo panel do the following.
1. You can either leave the strap system attached to
the side of the cargo area while it is not in use, or
you can store it inside the top box storage
for more information.
Panels 3, 2, 1 Loaded
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, place the latches in the
unlocked position. Place cargo panel 1 on the cargo
area rails while holding the back of the cargo
panel up.
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
midgate and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the pegs align with the receivers.
3. Push both left latches away from you to lock the
latches. Remember that there are four latches
total for panel 1. You should hear a click when each
latch locks. Lock the remaining two right latches
on panel 1.
For any cargo cover panel you must lock the left
latch in place before you can lock the right latch. If
you do not follow this exactly, the cargo cover
panels may not lock in place correctly.
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Install cargo cover 2 next. Place the latches in the
unlocked position. Place the cargo cover panel on
the cargo area rails while holding the back of
the cargo panel up.
5. Push the latches away from you, starting with the
left latch, to lock the panel in place. You should
hear a click when each latch locks correctly.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the pegs align with the receivers.
6. Install cargo cover 3 next. Place the latches in the
unlocked position. Place the cargo cover panel on
the cargo area rails while holding the back of
the cargo panel up.
2-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the pegs align with the receivers.
7. Push the latches away from you, starting with the
left latch, to lock the panel in place. You should
hear a click when each latch locks.
2-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding and Storage of Straps
To store the folding straps inside the top box storage
compartment, do the following:
2. Fold the four primary strap ends towards the center
as shown.
1. Extend the six strap ends on a flat surface.
3. Take the short strap and surround the folded
webbing, forming a package.
2-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Tie Downs
Cargo tie downs are located in the rear cargo area that
can be used to secure cargo.
The tie downs can also be used to secure the cargo
cover panel strap system or the tonneau cover storage
bag, if equipped. For more information see “Cargo
Cover Panels” earlier in this section and Tonneau Cover
on page 2-91.
4. Take the secondary strap and wrap it around the
package. Finally, attach the hooks to the webbing
and place inside the top box storage compartment.
2-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All-Weather Cargo Area
Your vehicle has the ability to operate in many different
configurations — cargo panels on or off, Midgate®
up or down, rear glass in or out. The vehicle has
features to help it resist the elements and protect cargo
inside the cargo area. Your vehicle is designed to
quickly direct water out of the cargo box. The top drain
grates, side rail channels, catch cups, Midgate®
drain, cargo area floor drains and the rubber cargo mat
help do this.
Even when all of these things are working properly and
the cover system is on, there may be some instances
(heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.) when
water may be present in the following areas:
A. Top drain grates
B. Removable front
drain grate
E. Water drainage
area around
both sides of the
box and the
(Midgate®
drain gate)
tailgate side
C. Side rail channels
and catch cups
D. Front drains
F. Rear drains
G. Cargo floor
H. Cargo mat
2-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Cleaning
Top Drain Grates – Removal and
Cleaning
To ensure that the water management system performs
properly, be sure that the Midgate®, tailgate and
cover system are fully closed and that all parts are
clean and not blocked with debris. Follow the
instructions given next in this section for the proper
procedures on cleaning each item.
The top drain grates are located near the rear glass on
both sides of the vehicle. Clean the grates and drains
if there is a blockage.
2-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove each drain grate, do the following:
To replace the drain grate do the following:
1. Remove the cargo panels or tonneau cover. See
1. Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots in the
grate.
2. When you are sure that the clips are aligned with
the slots, push the grate down firmly.
2. Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out from
the vehicle. Flush the drain with clean water.
The grate should clip into place. Do not force the grate
if it will not clip into place; realign the clips with the
holes and try again.
2-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Side Rail Channels
Midgate® Drain Grate Removal and
Cleaning
debris collects inside of them.
The Midgate® drain grate is located near the base of
the Midgate® in the cargo area. You will find a
removable drain grate covering the drain.
When loading cargo into the cargo area, be careful not
to damage the rails.
2-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After hauling dirt, wood chips, pebbles etc. you will
need to flush the Midgate® drain with water. But first
you will have to remove the drain grate by using
the following steps:
Cargo Area Floor Drains
Your vehicle also has four cargo-area floor drains
located under the cargo mat near the sides of the cargo
area. These drains should be cleaned periodically to
allow water to drain from the cargo area.
for more information.
The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains. Flush the
drains through the cutouts. If the cargo area is extremely
dirty lift up the edges of the cargo floor mat or take
the whole mat out and flush the drains with water.
2. Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate.
3. Tilt the drain grate away from you and pull it
straight out.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate.
2-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top-Box Storage
Tonneau Cover
{CAUTION:
Improperly stored tonneau cover components
could be thrown about the vehicle during a
collision or sudden maneuver. You or others
could be injured. If you remove the cover,
bows and rails, always store them properly in
the cargo area.
When you put them back, always be sure that
they are securely reattached.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a tonneau cover.
The main components of the tonneau cover are
the following:
Your vehicle has top-box storage units on both sides of
the vehicle. The passenger side top box contains the
tools you will need to change a flat tire.
Use the ignition/door key to unlock/lock it. Press the key
cylinder button and swing the lid open. Turn on the
cargo lamps, if the vehicle has them, for more
more information.
2-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Tonneau Cover
A. Front Rail
B. Bows
C. Side Rails
D. Rear Rail
E. Plastic Lip
F. Loop
1. Starting at the rear corner of the driver’s side of the
vehicle, pull the loop (F) toward you and then pull
up so the plastic lip (E) releases from the channel in
the rear rail (D) and the side rail (C).
2-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Pull the back of the cover out from the rear rail (D).
3. Roll the cover toward the front of the vehicle. The
plastic lip (E) will release from the siderails (C) as
you roll the cover forward.
2-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the storage bag, do the following:
4. Stow the cover using the buckles and the straps
attached to the front rail.
You can also store the tonneau cover outside of the
vehicle or use the storage bag included.
1. Attach the bag to the cargo tie downs as shown.
Unzip the top of the storage bag.
2-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Front/Rear Rails
and Bows
Before moving on to the next step, you will want to
attach the storage bag to the cargo tie downs, if it is not
already attached, so you will have a place ready to
store the front and back rails and the two bows.
2. With the tonneau cover rolled up, place it
in the proper compartment in the bag and
zip the bag shut.
1. Remove the rear rail by pulling it straight out from
the side rails. Set the rail aside.
2-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove the two bows
by gently pushing them
against the
spring-loaded end. Set
the bow aside.
3. With the midgate lowered, enter the rear passenger
page 2-12.
4. Remove the front rail by first twisting up the edge
nearest you, to clear the midgate seals, and then
pulling it out from the side rails.
2-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• When placing the bows in the side rails, it is easiest
to place the spring-loaded bow end in first.
• When placing the bows,
locate the small notches
in the side rails.
These notches receive
the tang on the bow
ends and help the bows
seat into place.
• When reinstalling the tonneau cover, start at the
front, near the cab. Place the plastic lip into the
front rail, then the rear rail, and finish with the
side rails.
5. Stow both bows and the front and rear rails in the
storage bag. When all components of the tonneau
cover are secured in the bag properly, zip the
bag shut.
To clean the tonneau cover, use mild soap and water. If
necessary, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt
trapped in the grain of the material.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tonneau cover
using the following suggestions:
• When reinstalling the front rail, start by holding the
back edge of the rail up and then twisting the back
edge down while pushing it into place.
• Both bows are the same size and therefore
interchangeable.
2-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From
the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s
side switch a second time to open the sunroof to
the full-open position.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition needs
to be turned to ON, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active. When RAP is active, the sunroof will work
for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or until a
front door is opened. See Retained Accessory Power
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the
driver’s side switch. The sunroof will open automatically.
To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a
second time. To express-close the sunroof, fully press
and release the front of the driver’s side switch. The
sunroof will close automatically. To stop the sunroof
partway, press the switch a second time. The sunshade
will open automatically with the sunroof, but can also
be opened manually.
There are two switches in
the overhead console that
operate the sunroof.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From
the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s
side switch a second time to open the sunroof to
the full-open position.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close
the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
2-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open feature.
From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof. To stop the
sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. To
close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
passenger’s side switch. To stop the sunroof partway,
release the switch.
Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at
the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then
open halfway, and the air deflector will raise. To close
the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
“Express-Close” or “Manual-Close” functions described
previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and
there is an object in the path of the sunroof when
it closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once it has
re-opened, refer to the “Manual-Close” or
“Express-Close” functions described previously.
2-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-44
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
P. Climate Control System or Dual Automatic Climate
Control System (If Equipped). See Climate
on page 2-35.
page 3-20.
F. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped).
page 4-6. Pedal Adjust Button (If Equipped).
page 2-33. Rear Park Assist Disable Button
(If Equipped). See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Washer Fluid Button (If Equipped). See Windshield
Disable Button (If Equipped). See Power Running
page 3-14.
K. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped).
page 3-11.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also let
police know you have a problem.
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on top of the steering
column.
Tilt Wheel
The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you enter
and exit the vehicle.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the
steering column under the turn signal lever.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
page 3-9.
on page 3-10.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever for
less than one second until the arrow starts to flash. This
will cause the turn signals to automatically flash
three times. It will flash six times if the tow-haul mode is
active. Holding the turn signal lever for more than
one second will cause the turn signals to flash until you
release the lever. The lever will return by itself when
it is released.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
turn or lane change.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see your turn
signal.
cluster will also be on.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
Flash-to-Pass
Turn Signal On Chime
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. See DIC Warnings and
message off, move the turn signal lever to the off
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They
will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.
6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. The
delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can be
very useful in light rain or snow.
6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to
the first solid band past the delay settings, for steady
wiping at low speed.
Windshield Wipers
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently
loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not
clear the windshield well, making it harder to see
and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,
? (High Speed): Turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings, for
high-speed wiping.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshield wipers,
the moisture sensor is located next to the inside
rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield. When
active, these sensors are able to detect moisture on
the windshield and automatically turn on the wipers.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must be
set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
of the rainsensor.
8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let
go. The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band on
mist longer, for more wipe cycles.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Since different drivers have different setting preferences,
it is recommended that the mid-range setting (position 3)
be used initially. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings
located closer to the off position on the multifunction
lever.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency
of the wipes from the off setting to the high speed
setting according to the weather conditions. The wipers
can be left in a rainsense mode even when it is not
raining.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the
AUTO position and the wipers are active.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The
wipers clear the window and then either stop or return
to the preset speed.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from your windshield.
{CAUTION:
The button is located in
the switchbank under the
climate controls.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Push the heated washer fluid button to activate the
heated windshield washer fluid system. The indicator
light will flash. This activation initiates four heated
wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take
up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to
begin. Press the button again to turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically
turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, cruise control is turned off.
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
cruise control back on.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer nozzles
for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.
This is a normal condition.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
T (On/Off): This button can both activate and turn
off the system. The indicator light is on when cruise
control is on and turns off when cruise control is off.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed
or make the vehicle decelerate.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time you do this, the vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) slower.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the
cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press the +RES button on your steering wheel. The
vehicle will go back to the previous set speed and
stay there.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle
will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.
Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until you reach your new desired speed,
then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Ending Cruise Control
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
• Press the On/Off button on the steering wheel.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off
the automatic headlamps and daytime running
lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to the off
position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL
back on.
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will
only work when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Taillamps
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on
for a set time. The time of the delay can be changed
page 3-47.
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
Headlamps on Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when
your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned
on and your key is out of the ignition. To turn off
the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and
then back on, or close and re-open the door. In the
AUTO mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition is
in LOCK or may remain on until the headlamp delay
ends (if enabled in the DIC). See “Exit Lighting” under
page 3-63.
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps together with the following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
• License Plate Lamps
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are
turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to
prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the
headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp
on position to make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P).
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
Push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to change the headlamps from low
beam to high beam.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
control to the OFF position and then release. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be
in the PARK (P) position, before the DRL lamps can
be turned off.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch
is in AUTO, the automatic headlamp system will turn on
the headlamps at the normal brightness along with other
lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps,
roof marker lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The
radio lights will also be dim.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must be in the PARK (P) position, before
the automatic headlamp system can be turned off.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Exterior Cargo Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
You can use the cargo lamp if you need more light in
the cargo area of your vehicle or in the top-box storage
units. Some vehicles will only have a cargo lamp in
the driver side top box.
The fog lamp button is located on the left side of your
instrument panel.
The cargo lamps come on by turning on the interior
dome lamps.
- (Fog Lamps): Press the button to turn the fog
lamps on. An indicator light will glow near the button
when the fog lamps are on. Press the button again
to turn them off.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob for this feature is located next to the exterior
lamps control.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the
instrument panel lights and the radio display. This only
works if the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the knob all the way clockwise.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you
restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog
lamp button again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
If your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to turn it on or off.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located next to
the exterior lamps control, clockwise to the farthest
position. In this position, the dome lamps remain
on whether a door is opened or closed.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn each one on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up
or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert
will be displayed.
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press
the button again to return it to the extended position so
that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Your vehicle has an illuminated entry/exit feature.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
When a door is opened or the key is removed from the
ignition, the dome lamps will come on if the dome
override button is in the out position.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located on the instrument panel and one inside
the center floor console.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Your vehicle may also have an outlet on the rear of the
center floor console above the cupholder door.
To use an outlet, remove the protective cap. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap. The
accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlets and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power plugs.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on
for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK.
This will help prevent the battery from running down.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
If your vehicle has this feature it is located in the center
console or on the instrument panel. Pull up on the
ashtray door to open it if it is in the console or pull the
door open it if it is on the instrument panel.
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation of
your vehicle can be controlled with this system.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
Manual Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of the vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console or
from the slide out door. To reinstall the ashtray,
slide it back to the original position.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
To use the cigarette lighter, if the vehicle has one, push
it in all the way, and let go. When it is ready for use,
it will pop back out by itself.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. The
flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets
depending upon where the knob is placed between the
settings. A little air is directed towards the windshield
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to
the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
Do not use the lighter to plug in accessory devices. Use
the power outlets provided.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor
outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield,
side window outlets, and second row floor outlets. In this
mode, the system will automatically select outside air.
Recirculation cannot be selected when in Floor Mode.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” later in this section.
help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly once
the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the
outside temperature.
By positioning the right knob between two modes, a
combination of those two modes is selected.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator light
will flash three times and turn off. The air conditioning
compressor will also come on when this mode is
activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may
fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the
fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase
the fan speed. Recirculation mode can be turned off
by pressing the button again, or turning off the engine.
The air conditioning compressor will be on unless the
outside temperature is close to freezing.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the
front system off.
: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn on the
outside air mode. When this mode is selected, air from
outside the vehicle will circulate throughout your
vehicle. An indicator light on the button comes on to
show that it is activated. The outside air mode can be
used with all modes, but it cannot be used with the
recirculation mode. Pressing this button again will cancel
the recirculation mode.
Temperature Control: Rotate the thumbwheels up
or down to increase or decrease the temperature on the
driver’s side or the passenger side of the vehicle for
the dual zone system, if equipped. Otherwise, turn the
center knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button on the left
knob to turn the air conditioning system on or off. When
A/C is pressed, an indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning has been activated.
? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn on the
recirculation mode. When the button is pressed, an
indicator light will come on.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. It
can be used to reduce outside air and prevent odors
from entering the vehicle. Recirculation may also
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
while in the defrost mode. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is close to freezing. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield. Turn the right knob
clockwise to select the defog or defrost mode.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button on
the right knob to turn on the rear window defogger. The
system will automatically turn off several minutes
after it has been activated. The defogger can also be
turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. When this mode is selected, the
system turns off recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode
directs a portion of the air to the windshield and
side window vents and some to the floor vents. In this
mode, the system will automatically force outside air into
the vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to
recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this
section.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The driver side temperature display
will show the temperature setting decreasing or
increasing.
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also
has a flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control
The passenger’s temperature buttons can be used to
change the temperature of the air coming through
the system on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The
temperature can be adjusted even if the system is
turned off. This is possible since outside air will always
flow through the system as the vehicle is moving
forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See
“Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The passenger side display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing.
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to match
the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the PASS
button and turning off the PASS indicator. When the
passenger’s temperature setting is set different than the
driver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS button will
illuminate and both the driver’s side and passenger’s side
temperature displays will be shown.
Driver’s Side Temperature Control
The driver’s side temperature buttons are used to adjust
the temperature of the air coming through the system
on the driver’s side. The temperature can be adjusted
even if the system is turned off. This is possible
since outside air will always flow through the system as
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system will
remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C), the
system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the
vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and
also turns on your headlamps. For more information
on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO will
be lit on the display. The current delivery mode and
fan speed will also be displayed for approximately
5 seconds.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle. The light on the
button will illuminate in recirculation.
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off the climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. Recirculation can be
selected once you have selected vent or bi-level mode.
The temperature can also be adjusted using either
temperature button. If you adjust the air delivery mode or
temperature settings with the system off, the display will
illuminate briefly to show you the settings and then return
off. Press the on/off button or the up down arrows on the
fan switch, the defrost button, AUTO button, or the air
conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Use the driver’s or
passenger’s temperature buttons to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
H (Vent): This setting will deliver air to the instrument
panel outlets.
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. The
flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets
depending upon where the knob is placed between the
settings. A little air is directed towards the windshield
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to
the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
y9 z (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols
allow you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the
up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
Pressing one of these buttons when the system is off
will turn the system on. Pressing one of these buttons
when in automatic control will place the fan under
manual control. The fan setting will remain displayed
and the AUTO light will turn off. The air delivery
mode will remain under automatic control.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the
windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically select
outside air.
yN z (Mode): Press the mode up and down
buttons to manually change the direction of the airflow
in your vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until
the desired mode appears on the display. Pressing
one of these buttons when the system is off will change
air delivery mode without turning the system on.
Pressing one of these buttons when in automatic control
will place the mode under manual control.
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed, an
indicator light will come on.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. It
can be used to reduce outside air and prevent odors
from entering your vehicle. Recirculation may also help
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly once
the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the
outside temperature.
The air delivery mode setting will be displayed and the
AUTO light will turn off. The fan will remain under
automatic control.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator will
flash three times and turn off. The air conditioning
compressor will also come on when this mode is
activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may
fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the
fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase
the fan speed. Recirculation mode can be turned off
by pressing the button again, or turning off the engine.
Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. When
air conditioning is selected, an indicator light will come
on to let you know that the air conditioning has been
activated.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
too cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning
indicator flash three times and then turn off to let you
know the air conditioning mode is not available. If the air
conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops
below a temperature which is too cool for air
conditioning to be effective, the air conditioning light will
turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode has
been canceled.
; (Outside Air): Press this button to turn on the
outside air mode. When this mode is selected, air from
outside the vehicle will circulate throughout your
vehicle. An indicator light on the button will come on to
let you know that it is activated. The outside air
mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot be used
with the recirculation mode. Pressing this button
again will cancel the recirculation mode.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it
takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
Sensors
located next to the steering
wheel that measures the
temperature of the air
inside your vehicle.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle
could cause a false reading in the displayed
temperature.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middle of
the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation.
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work
properly.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In order to prevent false temperature readings at
startup, the displayed temperature will not change until
the following occurs:
Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog
or defrost modes.
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. When you select this mode, the
system turns off recirculation and runs the air
• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 kmh) for
5 minutes.
• Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 kmh) for
2 and a half minutes.
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.
0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. This mode directs
a portion of the air to the windshield and side window
vents and some to the floor vents. In this mode, the
system will automatically force outside air into your
vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Your vehicle has air outlets located in the center and on
the side of your instrument panel that allow you to
adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the
vehicle. Move the louvers up or down. Use the
thumbwheel next to or underneath the outlet to close
the louvers. For the most efficient airflow and
temperature control, keep the outlet in the fully opened
position.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn on the rear window defogger. It will automatically
turn off several minutes after it has been activated. The
defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Operation Tips
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle’s
warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
the details show on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just
to let you know they are working. If you are familiar with
this section, you should not be alarmed when this
happens.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with warning lights and gages. See
more information.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States version shown. Canada similar.
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Tachometer
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for several
seconds and then flash for several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
light should go out and the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
{CAUTION:
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you start the engine. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there
is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come
more information.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more on this, including
important safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gage
This light will come on
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on, this gage shows
the battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, but the engine
is not running, as a
check to show you it
is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
for more information. This light could indicate that you
have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If
you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The charging system
regulates voltage based on the state of the battery
for improved fuel economy and battery life. The gage
may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low
and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
range. The gage may also read low during the fuel
economy mode, this is normal.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create full power. If
there is a problem with the battery charging system, this
light will come on or the SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM DIC message will display. See
information.
United States
Canada
Brake System Warning Light
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set the parking brake. If you
try to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime
will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h).
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
This light may also come on due to low brake fluid.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
page 4-42.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
This warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If
it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may
be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system and your
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on,
the system is off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it
is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37
This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak® system
is active.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on and
stays on for an extended period of time when the system
is turned on, your vehicle needs service. See
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
brake related DIC messages.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
United States
Canada
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
information.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so.
If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-63 for more information.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II
problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible.
Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure
zone, the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
message will appear in the Driver Information Center
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine. If it does not,
Oil Pressure Light
have your vehicle serviced.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that
oil is not flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
page 2-26.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
This light comes on when
the Tow/Haul mode has
been activated.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear in the Driver Information Center
for more information.
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
United States
Canada
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
This light, under the fuel
gage, will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
displays warning messages if a system problem is
detected.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
This light and a chime will come on when the fuel tank
is low on fuel. There will also be a “FUEL LEVEL
LOW” message on the Driver Information Center, see
information. When you add fuel this light and message
should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle
serviced.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and
page 3-63 for the displays available.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in
this section for the displays available.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons
DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions
are detailed in the
following pages.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below
explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
on page 3-63 for more information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the
trip odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC
displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons)” later in this section.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature.
Some vehicles also display instantaneous economy and
an Active Fuel Management™ indicator.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings, engine hours,
and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Odometer
U (Customization): Press this button to customize the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
information.
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will also display the trip odometer.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed
by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
the following menu items:
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display
the odometer.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “Units” later in this section.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Range
Fuel Used
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling. The display will show
LOW if the fuel level is low.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This
estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This
display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC.
The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will
return to zero.
Average Economy
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press
and hold the set/reset button.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Temperature
Vehicle Information Menu Items
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel
Management™ Indicator
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
If your vehicle has this display, press the trip/fuel button
until INST ECONOMY V8 MODE displays. This
display shows the current fuel economy at a particular
moment and will change frequently as driving conditions
change. This display shows the instantaneous fuel
economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average economy,
this screen cannot be reset.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
more information.
An Active Fuel Management™ indicator will display on
the right side of the DIC, while INST ECONOMY
displays on the left side. Active Fuel Management™
allows the engine to operate on either four or eight
cylinders, depending on your driving demands. When
Active Fuel Management™ is active, V4 MODE will
display on the DIC. When Active Fuel Management™
is inactive, V8 MODE will display. See Active Fuel
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
Engine Hours
Units
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information
will then be displayed in the unit of measurement
selected.
Relearn Remote Key
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE
transmitter to your vehicle:
Tire Pressure
1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V
TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
information.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the
trip odometer reset stem to view the following
displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer,
and display language.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Odometer
Blank Display
Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
This display shows no information.
Engine Hours
DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)
To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in
LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total
number of hours the engine has run.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
information below explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC
messages.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information,
and warning messages if a system problem is detected.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can
use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following
displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer, oil life,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming,
and display language.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See
“CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings and
addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last
turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Relearn Remote Key
Oil Life
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an
RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN
REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
will display.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
The available languages are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and NO
CHANGE.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the display.
Language
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
the currently set language displays.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem to scroll through all of the available languages.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
page 5-62. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
See “DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”
earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is low, the low
tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
page 5-29 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD OPEN
PARK ASSIST OFF
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is
not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started, this
message displays to remind the driver that the URPA
system has been turned off. Press the set/reset
button or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge
this message and clear it from the DIC display. To
turn the URPA system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in
a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a
drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
information.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-4.
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light
information.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
This message displays if a problem occurs with the
four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart
the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC
display. If the message is still displayed or appears
again when you begin driving, the four-wheel-drive
system needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If
the message is still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service. See
your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the Autoride® suspension system,
this message displays when the Autoride® suspension
system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
information.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-39. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-65 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak® system. If you see this message, try to reset
the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle
is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit
of StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive
accordingly.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
STABILITRAK OFF
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel
spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak®
off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or
snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to
free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions
and require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
• The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted
into 4LO.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
this light and message off.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays along with a continuous chime if
the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving
with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it
idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for the location of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons)
Feature Settings Menu Items
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors, including
the tailgate, will automatically lock when the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P).
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors, including the tailgate,
will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is
above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
You can also change the language by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in
this section for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors, including the
tailgate, will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors, including the
tailgate, will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
PARK (P).
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and tailgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and tailgate with the power door
lock switch and a door or the tailgate is open, this feature
will delay locking the doors and tailgate until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The key
must be out of the ignition for this feature to work. You
can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the
power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See
on page 2-4 for more information.
page 2-10 for more information.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the tailgate is closed.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT LIGHTING
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the
vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry
information.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay
on for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
more information.
EASY EXIT SEAT
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
for more information.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur.
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall
will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key
is removed from the ignition.
ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On
some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake
pedal feature, the pedals will also automatically move.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation
page 3-53 for more information on matching transmitters
to driver ID numbers.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the
automatic movement has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory
recall took place prior to removing the key again.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
on page 1-6 for more information.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
FACTORY SETTINGS
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
are pressed.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
Setting the Clock
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a
Single CD and DVD Player
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and
DVD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the
time and date.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton located
under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on
the radio screen until the time 12H and 24H, and the
date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the \
FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left ©
SEEK arrow or the s REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the f (tune) knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
radio has a MENU button instead of the H (clock)
button to set the time and date.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button.
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under
the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
2. Once the H (clock) option displays, press the
pushbutton located under that label. The HR,
MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,
and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the \
FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left ©
SEEK arrow or the s REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the f (tune) knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radios with CD and DVD
Playing the Radio
Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its features are explained later
in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down.
The volume level should be consistent while you drive.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.).
To activate SCV:
Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories.
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby® Laboratories.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio displays.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters displays. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect information that causes
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
increases the audio volume to compensate for faster
vehicle speeds.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either SEEK arrow to go to the
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
previous or to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were
previously adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
and RDS Features): Press this button to display
additional text information related to the current FM-RDS
or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional
information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and
CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing this
button to highlight the desired label, or press the
pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and
the information about that label displays.
To store a station as a favorite, perform the
following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
setting. Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either
SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward), or s REV
(reverse) button until the desired levels are obtained. If
a station’s frequency is weak or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for different
types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk,
jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and
treble settings.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If your radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
press the f knob until the speaker control labels display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
highlighted setting. Adjust the highlighted setting by
pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV
button until the desired levels are obtained.
• Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the
category list by pressing the s REV button or
the \ FWD button.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE
label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the
level adjusts to the middle position.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM™ station associated with that category.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow
to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station
within the selected category.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio
disables FADE and the rear speakers mute.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM™ Radio Online for when you are not in
your vehicle. A service fee is required to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the
U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in
Canada.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
in 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and in 30 seconds for a
DVD, depending on media type and format ranges.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. A
If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The
CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or
page 3-110 for more information. The DVD/CD decks,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD
deck) of the radio are compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. To
insert a CD while the ignition is off, first press the
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD
symbol displays on the left side of the radio display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
Z button or the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
Care of Your CDs
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle them
carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release to
eject the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting
from a radio with CD and DVD, ejects from the bottom
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The
disc can be removed. If the disc is not removed,
after several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back
into the player.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, clean it with a soft, lint
free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the disc
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order. To use random:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD
player. A RDM label displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM label until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.
For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds
on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on the
CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the right
arrow to go to the next track.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep sounds
and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or more discs
partway into the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to resume
playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio with
CD and DVD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when
not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway into
the slot. A RDM label displays.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play tracks from a single CD in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD
slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and
Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-101 for more information.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the
radio while a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or
DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for
viewing entertainment.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use
the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when a
CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at a time. An audio source is defined as DVD
slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or
Rear Auxiliary Jack.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing the track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM,
or XM™) by pressing the BAND button or the
DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front,
or rear auxiliary input (if available).
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the
front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from
this source through the vehicle speakers. See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
information.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
Radios with a CD and DVD player could display other
messages when an error occurs:
Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down.
In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
speakers can be muted when the RSA power is
for more information.
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or
unknown format.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT
problems.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Radios with a Single CD or a Six-Disc CD player have
the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
disc. For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R
or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For
more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
Playing a DVD
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If
a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101
for more information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101
information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and
WMA formats.
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds
to turn off the radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, and to start the parental control feature.
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from
operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote
control.
If an error message displays on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A lock symbol displays next to the clock display. The
parental control feature remains on until this knob
is pressed and held for more than two seconds again,
or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the
vehicle.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the
CD or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date
settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See
the information given earlier in this section specific to the
radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Clock”
in the index, for setting the clock and date.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or DVD. If
a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to
eject, press and hold this button for more than
five seconds to force the disc to eject.
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the left
arrow to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press the left arrow again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for
more information.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press the right
arrow to go to the next track or chapter. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control. See
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the
CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on display, the system is in pause
mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the
system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off,
press the play button to turn the screen on.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after,
for more information.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located under
the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. If
the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-101 for more information. The Video
Screen does not automatically power on when the
DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually
turned on by the rear seat occupant through the
remote control power button.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on the display, the system is in
pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the display,
the system is in playback mode.
y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
located under the navigation arrows to navigate
the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
selection press this button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
groupings on the DVD-A disc.
navigating through the menus.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is
sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the
DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
screen shows the audio stream changing.
To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the
radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote
control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop
button has been pressed twice on the remote control,
the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and shows “Loading
Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
automatically play the movie while others default to the
softkey menu display, which requires the radio’s
Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to be pressed. The
rear seat passenger can also start the disc with the
remote control.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc. If a
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the
radio reloads the disc after a short period of time. The
disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not resume
play of the disc automatically. If the RSA system
is sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into
the DVD player begins to play again. In case loading
and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed
(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject, press
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
and hold the DVD Z button more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
DVD Radio Error Messages
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device’s volume to the loudest level.
It is always best to power your portable audio device
through its own battery while playing.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might have to be made from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
turn it off.
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another audio source.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If
a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such as:
DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101
for more information.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By
default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left
side of the screen but plays both file formats in the
order in which they were recorded to the disc.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
number of files, folders, playlists or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders
and files to read and play.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c
(previous) and c T (next) folder buttons, the f
knob, or the © SEEK ¨ arrows. You can also play an
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no file
folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than
the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders
and files, the player lets you access and navigate up
to the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not
accessible.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as the CD label. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA)
and MP3 files, a folder under the root directory called
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty Directory or Folder
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name displays.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing an MP3
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R currently playing.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW or
all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do
one of the following:
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing
MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the display between the
arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the
player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on
the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files by that
artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files by another artist,
press the pushbutton located below either arrow button.
You will go to the next or previous artist in alphabetical
order. Continue pressing either button until the desired
artist is displayed.
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the
album name is displayed on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the
CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files from
that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on
the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio for
future listening.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number displays
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA files
depending on which slot the disc is loaded into. By default
the radio reads only the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and
ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD
deck, press the CAT (category) button to toggle between
compressed and uncompressed audio format, the default
being the uncompressed format (.CDA).
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls
extension as other file extensions might not work.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.
Order of Play
Root Directory
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Empty Directory or Folder
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name displays.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allows navigation of the disc. The menu
reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order), a
Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or down
through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has a
Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist
tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey
only or the menu as previously described.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When you
turn on the ignition or radio, the CD-R starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The
CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or
CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold this button for more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R automatically
pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD
cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more
than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA
file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA
files from the CD-R or CD-RW you are listening to in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
cT (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning,
press the pushbutton located below the music
navigator label or eject the disc.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside
the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the
CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-101
for more information.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. If you want to listen to MP3/WMA
files by another artist, press the pushbutton located
below either arrow button. The disc goes to the next or
previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
either button until the desired artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back
label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now
the album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begin
to play. Once all songs from that album are played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order
on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA
files from that album.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message appears after
having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of your vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio you have. To enable
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the
front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD
player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two
wireless headphones, and a remote control. See
the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.
The radio can be turned back on with a single press of
the power button, but the RSE system will remain
under Parental Control.
To turn Parental Control off, press and hold the radio
power button for more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously left and the padlock
icon disappears from the radio display.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or
ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the radio DVD
display menu, or changing an ignition position.
has this feature. The wireless headphones have an
On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control.
If your vehicle has a third row video screen display, it
has two additional headphones.
Headphones
Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An
indicator light located on the headphones comes on.
If the light comes on but there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator light
does not come on, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section
for more information. Switch the headphones to Off
when not in use.
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out of
the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
The headphones automatically turn off after four hours
of continuous use.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones are
used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s,
DVDAs, radio, any auxiliary source connected to
A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on
the upper left side, above the ear pad and should be
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should
be positioned on the right ear.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Battery Replacement
The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
allow audio or video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors
or cables (not included) might be required to connect
the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video
screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD
player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the
remote control switches the video screen from the
DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device
page 3-74 for more information.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if your vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available. See
“Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any
feature, do the following:
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if your
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system. See
information.
1. Press the z (display menu) button on the remote
control.
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has this
feature, the rear seat passengers are able to hear
audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless
or wired headphones. The front seat passengers
are able to listen to playback from this device through
the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source
on the radio.
2. Use the remote control n, q, p, o (navigation)
arrows and the r (enter) button to use the
setup menu.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the overhead console and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive
signals from the remote control. If the remote control
does not seem to be working, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also
affect the function of the remote control.
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control power button or eject the
disc to turn off the screen.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
page 3-74 for more information.
The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers
for the remote control. They are located at the rear
of the console.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Storage
in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
menu is active.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically
turns off after seven to ten seconds if no other button is
pressed while the backlight is on.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, fast
reversing, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to
pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD. This function may vary for
each disc.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio, you
might be able to do slow play by pressing the
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release this button. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
play/pause button then pressing the fast forward button.
The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode. You
can also, depending on the radio, perform reverse slow
play by pressing the play/pause button and then
pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel slow play
mode, press the play/pause button.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary
for each disc.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary
for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play button. To stop fast reversing a DVD
audio or CD, release this button. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical
inputs.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
video, press the play/pause button. To stop fast
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press
this button before entering the number.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control
uses a code set of Toshiba®.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the
remote control.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on to the remote control.
In auxiliary mode, the
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
picture moves or scrolls.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
The remote control does
not work.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
the DVD starts where I left DVD player resumes
off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD
beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed
two times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio is in your vehicle. The video screen can display
one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: Displays when there are disc
load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
Disc Format Error: Displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Disc Region Error: Displays if the disc is not from
a correct region.
Check that the
No Disc Inserted: Displays if no disc is present when
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can operate the RSA functions even when the
main radio is off. The front audio system will display the
headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will
disappear from the display when it is off.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If your
vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on
Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result.
The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the
RSA audio is active through the headphones.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through
the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the
front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,
or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat
passengers can only control the music sources the front
seat passengers are not listening to, except on some
radios where dual control is allowed. For example, rear
seat passengers can control and listen to a CD
through the headphones, while the driver listens to the
radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station or channels and stay
there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold either seek arrow until the display
flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed
for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
While listening to a disc, press the left seek arrow to go
to the start of the current track or chapter (if more
than ten seconds have played). Press the right seek
arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. This
function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
P (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on and off.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume of the wired headphones. The left knob
controls the left wired headphones and the right knob
controls the right wired headphones.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the
menu. Hold either seek arrow to perform a cursor left
or right on the menu.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your
vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
your vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, Enter.
xw (Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrow to
go to the next or to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could
display.
When a CD/DVD is playing, press either arrow to go to
the next or previous track or chapter.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release this
button to silence the vehicle speakers only. The
audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if your
vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and
release this button again, to turn the sound on.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and
hold this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to interact with the
OnStar® system. If your vehicle also has the navigation
system, press and hold this button for longer than
one second to initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar”
page 2-61 in this manual for more information.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the
power levels during the day, and then reduce these
levels during the night. Static can also occur when things
like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your
vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio
station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). Press
the seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter
while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press the seek
arrow to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD
player, if multiple discs are loaded.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss of
the XM signal for a period of time. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Fixed Mast Antenna
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will not
drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Braking
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. This
is normal.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel
the brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this is
normal.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, it can give you additional
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works
like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of
the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this
feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the
vehicle.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes if
that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have the StabiliTrak® system which
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
vehicle should be taken in for service. For more
information on the DIC messages, see Driver
The StabiliTrak® light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when
the system is both on and
activated.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
You may also feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak®
light along with one of the following messages will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
The traction control disable
button is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls.
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak® system has not been turned
off using the StabiliTrak® on/off button. Then turn the
steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position
to the three o’clock position. If this clears the
message(s), your vehicle does not need servicing. If this
does not clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle
off, wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to
reset the system. If any of these messages still
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), your
The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can be turned
off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button
if both systems (traction control and StabiliTrak®) were
previously on. To disable both traction control and
StabiliTrak®, press and hold the button for five seconds.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction control and StabiliTrak® can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button if
not automatically shut off for any other reason.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak® system is turned off, the
StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate TCS off or
StabiliTrak® off message will be displayed on the DIC to
warn the driver. Your vehicle will still have brake-traction
control when traction control is off, but will not be
able to use the engine speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak® light will flash if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while
driving. If you turn off traction control, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled.
In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.
When the traction control system has been turned
off, you may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your
page 4-33.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability system is
automatically disabled, the StabiliTrak® light will come
on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on
the DIC. Both traction control and StabiliTrak® are
automatically disabled in this condition.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
page 3-11.
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer for service.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
on page 4-6.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
page 4-3. It is better to remove as much speed as you
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the
If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then an acceleration skid
is also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The front fascia lower air dam is held in place by two
bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts and snap features
are accessible from underneath the front fascia.
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
does not have four-wheel drive, you should not
The following steps must be performed on the bolts and
snap features to remove the air dam:
drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down on the
snap features and disengage the snaps.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it
is free.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
replace the air dam.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front fascia lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine.
Always be sure to replace the front fascia air
dam when you are finished off-road driving.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide. You
will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
1. Line up the snap features and push the air dam
rearward to engage the snaps.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
fascia lower air dam.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Go Off-Roading
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is
there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are
the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the
local laws that apply to off-roading where you will be
driving? If you do not know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Take extreme care with open fires where permitted,
camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
You will find other important information in this manual.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
unnecessary driving through streams or over soft
ground.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
{CAUTION:
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet, and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
• You approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking
distances.
• You have less time to react.
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• You will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Approaching a Hill
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend,
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
{CAUTION:
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will
not have to make turning maneuvers?
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make your vehicle more visible to oncoming
traffic.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want the wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are some things you should do if the vehicle
stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up
the hill:
There are also some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
• If the engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if the wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with the wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put the
transmission in PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side
and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled
downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL
when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
{CAUTION:
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large
rocks?
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the
transfer case in the Two-Wheel High,
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help the brakes and
they will not have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Low position.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle is much more likely to stall when going
uphill. But if it happens when going downhill:
{CAUTION:
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
There some things not to do when driving down a hill.
These are important because, if you ignore them,
you could lose control and have a serious accident:
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take
you across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” The
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
{CAUTION:
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
When driving across an incline that is not too steep, the
vehicle can hit some loose gravel and start to slide
downhill. If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out
the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk
the course” so you know what the surface is like
before you drive it.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If
you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances. If your vehicle has four-wheel
case mode selection.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating,
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Driving in Water
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles,
or exhaust pipe, do not try — you probably will not
get through. Also, water that deep can damage the axle
and other vehicle parts.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and
your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get the tailpipe under water. And, as long as the tailpipe
is under water, you will never be able to start the
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when the brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
for more information on driving through water.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Driving at Night
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-55.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.
{CAUTION:
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
about driving off-road.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. But you can turn StabiliTrak®
down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
Under certain conditions, you might want to turn
StabiliTrak® off, such as when driving through deep
snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion
at lower speeds.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery
road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Recovery Hooks
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel High. For vehicles
with StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control part of the
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that could
free your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle
out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. Or,
you can use recovery hooks, if your vehicle has
them. If your vehicle does need to be towed out, see
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
Your vehicle has recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle. You can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
For more information on tires and inflation see
page 5-62.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
Label Example
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The
tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
information on towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door. The
label shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This
is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck
could shift forward and come into the
passenger area, injuring you and others. If
you put things in the bed of your truck,
you should make sure they are properly
secured.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components
that fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo
and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to
get added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you can
carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your
vehicle before you buy and install the new
equipment.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended
to carry a slide-in type camper.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
Notice: Adding a slide-in camper or similar
equipment to your vehicle can damage it, and
the repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not install a slide-in camper or
similar equipment on your vehicle.
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-28.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Two-wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
page 2-45.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
procedure to select the neutral position for your
vehicle.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Dolly Towing
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the
Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
3. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
4. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground.
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
dolly.
Two-wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with the
rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, you must tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
the Ground)” later in this section for more information.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
page 2-45.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
procedure to select the neutral position for your
vehicle.
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow
vehicle.
Make sure the wheels are straight before
proceeding to the next steps.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable
from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to
prevent your battery from draining while towing.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable
from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to
prevent your battery from draining while towing.
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
page 2-45 for more information.
3. Put the transmission in PARK (P).
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
the rear:
{CAUTION:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
page 2-45.
3. Put the transmission in PARK (P).
4. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
5. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach
and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and
then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle.
Make sure the wheels are straight before
proceeding to the next steps.
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
procedure to select the neutral position for your
vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable
from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to
prevent your battery from draining while towing.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Level Control
Towing a Trailer
The self-adjusting rear suspension may come as part of
the premium smooth ride suspension package.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
This type of level control will provide a leveled riding
position as well as improved handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions. A hydraulic pump
inside each rear shock absorber raises the rear of the
vehicle to the proper height, based on inputs from the
road surface, while the vehicle is being driven. It take
approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete, depending on the road surface conditions.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately
12 hours, the leveling system may bleed down to a lower
height. This can be especially apparent if a trailer is
left attached to a parked vehicle for long periods of time.
The vehicle must be driven to re-level the vehicle.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, the vehicle
should be driven approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) with the
trailer prior to adjusting the hitch.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer/retailer for more information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in
this section.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to
indicate that tow/haul
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is most
useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to do the following:
mode has been selected.
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul every
time it is started.
Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavy load or
with no trailer will cause reduced fuel economy and
unpleasant engine and transmission driving
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
characteristics, but will not cause damage.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/haul
is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.
Press the button at the end of the shift lever to
enable/disable the tow/haul mode.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must
be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Use the following chart to determine how much your
vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and
options.
Notice: Using a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitch
device on your vehicle could damage the vehicle. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not use a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitch device on
your vehicle.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
3.73
Maximum Trailer Weight
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
*GCWR
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
C-1500 (2WD)
5.3L V8
4.10
8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)
C-1500 (2WD)
6.0L V8
4.10
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
3.73
4.10
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
K-1500 (4WD)
5.3L V8
K-1500 (4WD)
6.0L V8
4.10
7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
for more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) for the 1500 series and
up to a maximum of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the 2500 series
with a weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for
your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will
position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help
reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If
they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce your
trailering capacity more than the total of the additional
weight.
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to
trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only
be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think
you must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still
consider the effect on the rear axle. Because your
rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without
Hitches
exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is
about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs
(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to handle
only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongue
weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer
weight, you can expect that the largest trailer your
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The
only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these
ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
over the GVW and rear axle limits for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you
don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distributing spring bars.
(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. You should always use a sway control
if your trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can
ask a hitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Safety Chains
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Backing Up
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier in this section.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant at higher altitudes
will boil at a lower temperature than at or near sea
level. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle
may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid
this, let the engine run while parked (preferably on
level ground) with the automatic transmission in
PARK (P) for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If you do get the overheat warning, see Engine
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL (N).
6. Release the regular brakes.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll.
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
If the transfer case on four-wheel-drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
NEUTRAL.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed **#
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake #
**If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,
press the tow/haul mode button located at the end of the
shift lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage
and properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light
for tow/haul mode, you can turn on the headlamps
as a second way to boost the vehicle system and charge
the battery.
#The fuses for these circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. These circuits should be connected by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service technician.
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to the rear
bumper beam. It is located next to the integrated trailer
hitch.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of
the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include
the weight of the people inside, but you can figure about
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load
must not be more than your vehicles CWR.
These wiring provisions are included with your vehicle
as part of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
These provisions are for an electric brake controller.
The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the
data link connector for the trailer brake controller.
The harness contains the following wires:
Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached, so that
you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
the spring bars in place.
• Dark Blue: Auxiliary
• Red/Black: Battery #
• Light Blue: Brake Switch
• White: Ground
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
The trailer brake controller should be installed by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-63
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may
be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0)
or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), you can use
either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel E85
only regular unleaded gasoline.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Octane
California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Specification D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel
labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between
70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures
that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect
driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to come on.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best
not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If
you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add
as much fuel as possible — do not add less than
three gallons (11 L) when refueling. You should drive
the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0) or the
5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), you can use either regular
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
other engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0)
or the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3) can use 85% ethanol
fuel (E85). We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles
that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is
a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable
sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when
using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm your vehicle’s fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by
additives would not be covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has
E85 fuel capability, a yellow cap with the words “E85
or gasoline” can be seen.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the
last turn as you loosen it.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-55 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-40.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole
before tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap clockwise
until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the
fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the
cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
page 3-40.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
of the steering
wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the
secondary hood release, near the center of the
grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open
to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front center of the
hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See
on page 5-109.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
page 5-40.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the
Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 5-22.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View). See
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
page 5-30.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
When to Add Engine Oil
engine oil fill cap.
I
t
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance and
engine protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming
on, reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If
your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to access this display.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,
or the trip odometer reset stem if your vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine
air cleaner/filter and the air
filter restriction indicator, if
the vehicle has one.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When you have the engine air cleaner/filter
removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If
the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator, it lets
you know when the engine air cleaner/filter needs to
be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction indicator, you
should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at
every oil change and replace the engine air cleaner/filter
when the indicator tells you to.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
1. Locate the air
cleaner/filter assembly.
See Engine
on page 5-14.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air
cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or
is in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and
reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace
the engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter
restriction indicator.
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if the vehicle
has one, by pressing the top button on the indicator.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air cleaner/
filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
The transmission dipstick
handle with this graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consistency of Readings
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid
level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-27.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it
is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
{CAUTION:
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE
POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along
with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
to a safe place in an emergency.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or
the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
1. If the vehicle has an air conditioner and it is on,
turn it off.
You might decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
2. Turn on the heater to the highest temperature and
at the highest fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle immediately.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle has an
engine-driven cooling fan, push down the accelerator
until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal
idle speed for at least five minutes while parked.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
page 5-15.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle has an
electric cooling fan, idle the engine for five minutes
while parked.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. If possible,
the vehicle should be parked on a level surface. Check
the coolant level after the system cools down. Some
amount of coolant may be lost due to overheating.
5.3L Engine (6.0L Similar)
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-29 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling
system.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure steps 1 through 6.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has electric cooling fans. You might hear
the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday
driving. The fans can turn off if no cooling is required.
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or
high outside temperatures, or if you are operating the
air conditioning system, the fans can change to
high speed and you might hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and indicates that the cooling system
is functioning properly. The fans change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
Power Steering Fluid
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
reservoir location.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing in an area where the temperature may fall
below freezing.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC
that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The
message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of
each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW
ADD FLUID message displays, you will need to
add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
Notice:
reservoir.
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that
fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is,
you should have the brake hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will
not work well.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Checking Brake Fluid
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
Brake Wear
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Battery
Brake Pedal Travel
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, the disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-40 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Jump Starting
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This
avoids sparks and helps save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put the automatic transmission
in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL
before setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
If the vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal, it is
located under a red plastic cover at the positive
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
The remote negative (-) terminal is a stud located
on the right front of the engine, where the negative
battery cable attaches.
for more information on the location of the
remote positive (+) and remote negative (-)
terminals.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
{CAUTION:
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the
remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
Rear Axle
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
When to Check Lubricant
vehicle that had the bad battery.
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain
level. When checking the fluid level on any axle,
variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill
differences between the minimum and the maximum
fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle has just been driven
before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than
normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle
tubes and has not drained back to the sump area.
Therefore, a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle
has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid
level than a vehicle that has been stationary for
an hour or two. Remember that the rear axle assembly
must be supported to get a true reading.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if the
vehicle has one, to its original position.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
• For 5.3L engines, the proper level is from 0.04 inch
to 0.75 inch (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom
of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
• For 6.0L engines, the proper level is from 0.6 inch
to 1.6 inches (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom
of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Automatic Transfer Case
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug
hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps can be affected and adjustment
can be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
can mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs
to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
1500 Series
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
• Have tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
for more information.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
E8 Torx® socket.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted
to be seen on the flat surface.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove the two
screws from the
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
taillamp assembly.
A. Stoplamp/Turn
Signal/Taillamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Turn
Signal/Taillamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you
disengage the outer pins on the taillamp assembly
from the vehicle.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
4. Press the release tab, if the bulb socket has one,
and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it from the taillamp assembly.
more information.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert the
bulb socket into the taillamp assembly. Turn the
bulb socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly
until it clicks.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly making sure to line
up the pins with the vehicle.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License Plate Lamp
Replacement Bulbs
To replace one of these bulbs:
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
7441
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket.
License Plate Lamp
168
Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp,
and Stoplamp
Sidemarker Lamp
3057
194
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb socket out of the connector.
3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb
socket.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly, do the following:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the
blade, and rotate the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Overinflated tires are more likely
to be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
20-Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch
P275/55R20 size tires, they are classified as
touring tires and are designed for on road use. The
low-profile, wide tread design is not recommended
page 4-12, for additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 5-72.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that
load. For information on recommended tire
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter
P as the first character in the tire size means
a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size
means a light truck tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-62.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
page 4-35.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-35.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-69.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
for additional information.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
and Loading Information label and its location on
page 5-62.
instrument panel cluster.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
page 5-70.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/
wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined
below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the
DIC screen.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
on page 4-35.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
When It Is Time for New Tires
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
for information on proper tire rotation.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle might not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types could also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
same size, brand, and type tires on all wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle may have a different size spare
than the road tires (those originally installed
on your vehicle). When new, your vehicle
included a spare tire and wheel assembly with
a similar overall diameter as your vehicle’s
road tires and wheels, so it is all right to drive
on it. Because this spare was developed for
use on your vehicle, it will not affect vehicle
handling.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20
size tires, do not use tire chains. They can
damage your vehicle because there is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes, suspension,
or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose control
of your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has P265/70R17 size tires,
use tire chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
vehicle’s tires. Install them on the rear tires only.
Do not use chains on the front tires.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire
on the other side, at the opposite end of
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use this as a guide to
assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack and the wheel blocks are located under a
cover near the passenger side rear seat.
Rear Seat (Passenger Side) Jack Cover
1. Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing nuts
one-quarter turn counterclockwise and pulling the
jack cover off.
A. Wheel Blocks
B. Knob
C. Wing Nut
E. Jack
F. Jack Head
G. Mounting Bracket
D. Retaining Hook
2. Release the jack (E) from the mounting bracket (G)
by turning the knob (B) on the jack counterclockwise
to lower the jack head (F) from the mounting
bracket.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the wheel blocks (A) attached to the
jack (E) by turning the wing nut (C)
To access the spare tire:
counterclockwise. Place the wheel blocks where
needed as indicated in previously in this section.
The tools for changing a flat tire are located in the
passenger’s side top-box storage unit.
To remove the tools, do the following:
1. Open the top door on the passenger’s side top-box
storage unit. Use the ignition/door key to unlock it if
for more information.
2. Remove the black pouch from the storage box.
You now have all of the tools you will need to
lower the spare tire and change a flat.
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extension(s)
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire/Wheel
Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
J. Spare Tire Lock
1. Open the hoist shaft access cover on the bumper to
access the spare tire lock (J).
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Insert the ignition key, turn it clockwise and then pull.
4. Insert the open end of
the extension (F)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (G) (hoist
shaft access hole).
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (I) and
wheel wrench (H) as shown.
Be sure the hoist end (F) of the extension connects
to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of
the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the
wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
page 5-89 for more information.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you to
pull the hoist cable
towards you, to assist
in reaching the
spare tire.
7. Tilt the tire with slack in the cable to access the
tire/wheel retainer (D). Separate the retainer from
the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin
while pressing down on the latch. When the
retainer is separated from the guide pin, tilt the
retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel
along with the cable and guide pin.
8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the vehicle has a
center cap, place the
chiseled end of
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
the wheel wrench in
the slot on the
wheel and gently pry
the cap out.
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
If the vehicle has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen the
plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be
retained in the hub cap after it is removed from
the wheel.
The tools needed are the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B),
the jack handle (C), the jack handle extensions (D),
and the wheel wrench (E).
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Use the wheel
wrench to loosen all
the wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Position
Rear Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and
only one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack
handle to the jack (A). Position the jack on the
frame behind the flat tire near the front body mount
as shown. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to
raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for the
spare tire to clear the ground.
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B)
and both jack handle extensions (C). Attach
the wheel wrench (D) to the jack handle
extensions (C). Attach the jack handle (B) to the
jack (A). Use the jacking pad provided on the rear
axle. Turn the wheel wrench (D) clockwise to
raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for the
spare tire to clear the ground.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the
wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-78.
6. Take off the flat tire.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the
spare tire.
10. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the wheel nuts until the
wheel is held against the hub.
8. Install the spare tire.
11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a crisscross
{CAUTION:
sequence as shown by
turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
When you reinstall the full-size wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the either the center cap or the bolt-on
hub cap, depending on what your vehicle has.
• If you are reinstalling a center cap, line up the tab
on the center cap with the slot on the wheel. The
cap only goes in one way. Place the cap on
the wheel and press until it snaps into place.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
• If you are reinstalling bolt-on hub caps, line up the
plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and tighten them
clockwise by hand to get them started. Continue
tightening with the wheel wrench until snug.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible. If
the cable is not
visible proceed to
Step 6.
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
page 5-92.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed next.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
page 5-79.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the rear
bumper.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull
it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
15. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Spare Tire/Flat
Tire (Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire/Wheel
Retainer
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extension(s)
E. Hoist Shaft
J. Spare Tire Lock
1. Put the tire (A) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tilt the tire. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (D)
from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the
center of the wheel. Tilt the retainer down through
the center wheel opening.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (I) and
wheel wrench (H) as shown.
4. Insert the open end of
the extension (F)
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
through the hole in the
rear bumper (G) (hoist
shaft access hole).
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Close the hoist shaft access cover.
To store the tools, follow these steps:
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You
cannot overtighten the cable.
1. Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back in
the top-box storage unit.
2. Assemble the wheel blocks and jack together with
the wing nut by reversing Step 2 under Removing
the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-79
3. Replace the jack cover and tighten the jack-cover
wing nuts.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together. If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
match your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels
in size and type, do not include the spare in the
tire rotation.
Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on your vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can
have your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You
could damage your vehicle, and the repair costs
would not be covered by your warranty. Never use
four-wheel drive when the different size spare
tire is installed on your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it. If your vehicle has
four-wheel drive and the different size spare tire is
installed, keep the vehicle in two-wheel drive.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-100.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Swirl Remover Polish
Description
Polishing Cloth
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
engine code.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool
down period, protecting the circuit until the problem
is fixed or goes away.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn
Signal
The instrument panel fuse block access door is located
on the driver side edge of the instrument panel.
5
6
7
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
8
9
Passenger Door Module, Universal
Home Remote System
10
11
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
Stoplamp
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Rear Climate Controls
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
1
2
3
4
Rear Seats
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat Entertainment
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,
Power Liftgate
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
20
21
22
23
24
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Rear Wiper
Top View
Not Used
Driver Seat Module, Remote
Keyless Entry System
25
26
Not Used
Harness
Connector
Usage
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Driver Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
Harness Connector
Harness
Usage
Connector
BODY 2
BODY 1
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
Harness
Connector
Usage
BODY 3
Body Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
Special Equipment Option Upfitter
SEO/UPFITTER
Harness Connector
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
Rear Sliding Window
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the
cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Engine Controls
4
Engine Control Module, Throttle
Control
5
6
7
Trailer Brake Controller
Front Washer
8
Oxygen Sensors
9
Antilock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
10
11
12
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Right Side)
13
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
14
15
16
Fuses
Usage
1
Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
17
18
19
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Electronic Stability Suspension
Control, Automatic Level Control
Exhaust
2
3
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
20
21
Usage
Fuses
40
41
Usage
Airbag System (Ignition)
Amplifier
Fuel Pump
Fuel System Control Module
Headlamp Washers
22
42
Audio System
23
Rear Windshield Washer
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Left Side)
Trailer Park Lamps
Driver Side Park Lamps
Passenger Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise
Control
Liftgate Release
Airbag System (Battery)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Take-Off
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),
Compass-Temperature Mirror
43
24
44
45
46
47
25
26
27
28
29
48
Horn
49
50
51
52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Rear Defogger
Heated Mirrors
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Relay, SEO Upfitter Usage
Climate Controls (Ignition)
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lights 2
Sunroof
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
System
Windshield Wiper
30
31
32
33
34
53
54
55
56
35
36
37
38
39
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Climate Controls (Battery)
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
FAN HI
FAN LO
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Cooling Fan 1
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System
Cooling Fan 2
Antilock Brake System 1
Starter
ENG EXH VLV Not Used
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
PWR/TRN
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
Cooling Fan Control
Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
Electric Running Boards
Heated Windshield Washer System
Four-Wheel Drive System
Parking Lamps
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery
Power)
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
RUN/CRANK Switched Power
68
69
70
71
72
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
Climate Control Blower
Power Liftgate Module
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
5.3L V8, 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel and 6.0L V8
Engine Oil with Filter
16.8 qt
15.9 L
5.3L V8, 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel, 6.0L V8
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid
6.0 qt†
31.5 gal
5.0 qt
5.7 L†
119.2 L
4.7 L
Transfer Case Fluid
2.0 qt
1.9 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 lb ft
190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range.
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
5.3L with Active Fuel
Management™
J
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™
(Iron)
0
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™
(Aluminum Block)
3
Automatic
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8 with Active Fuel
Management™
Y
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
CAUTION: (Continued)
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Do your own maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and the proper
tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
on page 5-6.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, you should have your dealer/retailer do these
jobs.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
{CAUTION:
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-14.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these are
used. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts from
your dealer/retailer.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset
the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-10.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
page 5-19.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
•
•
Change transfer case fluid. See
footnote (g).
•
•
•
•
Inspect evaporative control system. An
Emission Control Service. See footnotes
† and (k).
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints
are maintenance-free.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-101 for more information.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
midgate hinges, side storage box door hinges, tailgate
hinges, tailgate linkage, outer tailgate handle pivot
points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks, and folding seat
hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check
that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
page 5-62. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-68.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
• The ignition key should come out only
in LOCK/OFF.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
{CAUTION:
on page 2-45.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
page 5-15.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Hood Support Gas Strut Service
Engine Oil
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, corrosion,
cracks, loss of lubricant, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of gas strut. If necessary, replace
with genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-24.
Engine Coolant
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Chassis Lubricant
Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Points
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021671, in
Canada 89021672).
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Front Axle
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
SAE 75W-90
Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678) meeting GM
Specification 9986115.
Synthetic Grease
Weatherstrip with Teflon, Superlube
Rear Axle
Squeaks
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
One-Piece
Propshaft
Spline
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
(Two-Wheel
Drive with Auto.
Trans.)
GM 9985830.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
ACDelco® Part
Part
GM Part Number
Number
Engine Air Cleaner /Filter
High Capacity Filter
Standard Filter
15908915
15908916*
A3085C
A3086C*
Oil Filter
5.3L V8, 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel, 6.0L V8
Spark Plugs
89017524
12571164
15930910
PF48
41-985
—
5.3L V8, 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel, 6.0L V8
Wiper Blades (ITTA Type)
Front – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm)
*A3085C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, in the U.S., contact the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, contact General Motors of Canada Customer
Communication Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to
binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by an
impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal
hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed
so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the
time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in
most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or you may write to:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe
to E-News and use tools and forms with
greater ease.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.Chevrolet.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Customer Assistance Offices
Canada — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States — Customer Assistance
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) —
Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872);
(Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
Services Provided
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in
North America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will
not be provided through this service.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day),
(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to
an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,
the claims become excessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum
of $40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some
of the unplanned expense you may incur while
waiting for your vehicle to be repaired.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
• Description of the problem
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on
a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Additional Program Information
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at
its sole discretion.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an
acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
Collision Parts
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510
or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer/retailer,
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
or General Motors.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Service Bulletins
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Owner Information
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate
the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
OnStar®
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System (cont.)
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-72
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-12
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving (cont.)
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-40
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-18
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
